JP7214670B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous state when a specific result is derived and displayed,
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, and third cover body 330) provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from remaining and screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion Can stay on the screw drop limiting portion without falling into the guide passage forming portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336 (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), recess 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, Fig. 22(C), Fig. 23(A), (B),
See FIG. 24))),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times ,
When the variable means is positioned at the second position, the screw member is less likely to fall into the dispensing portion than when the variable means is positioned at the first position.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
Performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). As shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100,
A part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13 , the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, it is possible to increase the motivation of the game.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include an invention relating to a game machine of the following means 2 or 3. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the number of times of special figure games executed in the normal game state (the number of times of execution of variable display) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.) is 1000 When the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of times (special number of times) is reached (establishment of special conditions), the game state is controlled to a variable probability state, and the probability that it is determined to be a big hit as a result of the special game is increased. It is increased to about 1/100, and the big hit is likely to occur in the special game after that, and the big hit occurs even if the number of times of the special game (the number of times of execution of the variable display) reaches 1000 times in the normal game state. When there was none, there was something that generated a time-saving state instead of a variable state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief for the player is insufficient when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the special number of times. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that are

The gaming machine of means 2 is
Performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. is a game machine,
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
Updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The state control means can be controlled to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). As shown in the game control microcomputer 100, steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed, and steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS.
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13 , a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the desire to play the game can be enhanced. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
Predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-49, step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 is executed part) and
Based on the establishment of the special condition, a special notification effect that notifies that the control of the special state is started (for example, the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2) , blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), etc.) , As shown in FIGS. 36-23, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS 638),
In the period before the special condition is established, the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-44, the effect control CPU 120 (see FIGS. 36-50).
According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining time saving classification. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characteristic part 108IW; It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of telop display during customer waiting; It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the pre-reading advance notice effect; It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advance notice effect execution determination table and an advance notice effect mode determination table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display to reduce the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of time-saving rush imitation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production; It is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that saves time in Modification 1; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications 2 to 4 of the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a forewarning effect execution determination table and a forecast effect mode determination table in Example 2; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in the modified example 1 of Example 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of the production mode until it shifts to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover from falling onto the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a state of being able to stay, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole, so that the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion will not be mixed in the delivery portion. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined largest hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw member. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be utilized to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
the special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member;
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) allows the game medium (for example, the game ball P) to flow down from the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202); It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) capable of retaining screw members dropped onto the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, a screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (see FIG. 8 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
Screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) are provided for reinforcing the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and FIG. 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guiding passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guiding passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as special identification information of a plurality of types are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward the game area Y by a player's rotation operation to the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and on the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface are attached from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. are doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) ends of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them at the time of maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they are installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the electronic component, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to detour the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the lateral direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion for covering the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is accommodated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as detouring the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery of the portions where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, bypassing the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and the data stored in the memory means (RAM) can be prevented from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts with On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and is advantageous when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) controllable to a state (eg, jackpot gaming state), and a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P). , a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that forms a second guide passage), and a portion of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion provided to cover A state control means capable of controlling a cover portion (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) and a special state (eg, time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. part), and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a predetermined restricting portion (eg, Long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24) so that a screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion can reach the dispensing portion. A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting movement are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the predetermined restricting portion is a screw that has fallen onto the cover portion. A first retention portion (eg, long holes 316A to 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, groove 326A) that can retain members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) on the cover portion 326C), wherein the second retention portion is more likely than the first retention portion to be the dispensing portion (for example, the dispensing portion). (L22B>L21), and the state control means controls that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is established by (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13 , the portion executing step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) game machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In other words, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion. Since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the identification information is executed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times than in the case of doing so, and the player is more likely to be rescued, so that the desire to play the game can be enhanced. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and that can increase the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion and can suitably realize the relief of the player, variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. 2. A game machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed, and is more favorable than a normal state. Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 part that executes , as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100 IWS 537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, FIG. 36- 13, a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is established by (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) game machine. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 32 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 34 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 108IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 108IW, the game state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variable state (also controlled in a time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal pattern is 10% in a normal state, the probability of hitting a normal pattern is increased to 90% in a time saving state, and a game ball wins a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, to the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win a prize.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after turning on the power to the game machine, after the occurrence of the big hit, after the occurrence of time saving, after the occurrence of relief time saving, even if the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) is completed, the next big hit Even if there is no time-saving deviation, it may be controlled to a time-saving state (relief time-saving).

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability per normal pattern may be 1/1, or the probability of deviation is extremely low and the probability per normal pattern may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) is not performed, some or all of the above (2) to (4) are performed to achieve a high base state. may

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.
2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1", which has the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of variations n is 797-957, and the number of times of time saving N is 127-1212. In this example, both the number of times of fluctuation n and the number of times of reduction of working hours N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied even when set to any of the set values.

(Example 1)
Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-1 to 36-47.

(board configuration)
FIG. 36-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, a right-handed informing LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among them, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that performs variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged vertically, respectively, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this characterizing portion 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 108IW, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present characteristic portion 108IW, it is more advantageous in the normal state to perform a shooting operation (left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time-saving loss probability)
FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 36-2 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 36-3 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 36-2 (A) and 36-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5” increase in order, and the set value “6” has the highest hit probability “242/65536”. It is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 (B) and 36-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2420/65536". It is high (approximately 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 36-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 36-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

While the big hit probability is changed according to the set value as described above, even if the time saving probability is configured to be constant, as shown in FIGS. By varying the probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured so as to be controllable to a small winning game state. When the configuration is such that the small hit can also be determined, for example, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the small hit probability may be configured to be constant.

In addition, when the small hit is configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a time-saving small hit that is controlled to the time-saving state with the small win as a trigger.

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3 is an example, and various modes are conceivable as how to set the jackpot probability and the time-saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 36-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 36-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 36-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 36-4(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs.

A "variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a 15-round big-hit game state and is shifted to a variable-probability state after the big-hit game state ends. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

The "suddenly variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a two-round big win game state and is shifted to a variable probability state after the big win game state is ended. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "variable probability jackpot", in each round of 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game The big winning hole is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the big winning hole is performed 15 times). On the other hand, when the "sudden probability variable jackpot" occurs, in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the big prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the big prize opening is opened for a short period of time). opening is performed twice). Therefore, in the event of a "suddenly variable probability big hit", it is possible to make it appear as if a sudden transition to a variable probability state has occurred, since it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to be won in the big winning slot.

As shown in FIG. 36-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. It is determined as a "variable probability big hit" with a probability, and determined as a "sudden variable probability big hit" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. A probability of 5% is determined as a "variable probability big hit", and a probability of 5% is determined as a "suddenly variable probability big hit".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 36-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 36-5(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 36-5(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIG. 36-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIGS. 36-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the time saving is lost, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the time saving In any case of loss, with a probability of 1/3 it is determined to be "time saving A", with a probability of 1/3 it is decided to be "time saving B", and with a probability of 1/3 "time saving C" is determined.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 36-5 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability of "time saving C" is increased, while if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, "time saving The determination ratio of the time reduction type may be made different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as by increasing the determination probability of "loss A".

In addition, for example, if it is configured to be able to determine the time saving loss even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, it may be configured not to uniformly overwrite the time saving counter or the like even if the time saving loss occurs, or the time saving loss pattern It may be configured so that there are cases where the time saving number counter and the like are overwritten and cases where they are not overwritten depending on the type.

FIG. 36-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 36-6, in this example, in the normal state, when it becomes "time saving out A", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times in the case of "time saving out of B", time saving number of times 50 It is controlled to the time saving state of times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times of the number of time saving. Also, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit, and when it becomes "time saving B", it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of times of 200 times, "time saving is off" C”, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of the number of times of time saving.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving by relief time saving, if no big hit occurs even after 800 times of fluctuation display is completed, relief time saving is performed again. It is controlled to the time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 time saving times. Therefore, the number of times of time saving by relief time saving is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1−ML)n={(P−1)÷P}n
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of times of time saving when time saving is lost is not limited to that shown in FIG. 36-6. For example, even if the same time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that it is the same at 100 time-saving times during the normal state and during the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW. Among them, FIG. 36-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big wins. Also, FIG. 36-7(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 36-7(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 36-7 (D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 36-8 (E) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 36-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8 (F) is a variation pattern table for just before the relief time saving selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

Also, FIG. 36-8(H) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table H for the loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, FIG. 36-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display that shortens the repair time. Further, FIG. 36-8(J) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table J for the big hit of the variation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 36-7(A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening variation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 36-7 (C), 36-7 (D), and 36-8 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the variation pattern PA1-4 Due to the (super-ultra-shortened variation), the rate at which the variation display is executed is increased, and the period until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 36-7 (C), 36-7 (D), and 36-8 (E), in this example, compared to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultrashortening variation) The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or via the jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ) and no super-reach is performed. In other words, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened there is With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of deviation, but may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via relief time-saving, super reach may be executed at loss at a lower rate than in the time-saving state controlled via time-saving loss or jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Since the ratio of becoming becomes lower, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (F), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher. Also, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (G), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and (G), if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is not determined and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest when super reach variable display is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not achieved. Note that even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened (that is, the period using the variation pattern table C shown in FIG. 36-7 (C)) At a lower rate, It may be determined to be the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) at the time of loss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variation state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, in the probability variation state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if it is lost, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rush failure). be. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing in rush) is a variation pattern dedicated to the short-relief time, which is not used for the variable display that does not result in the short-relief time, but is used only in the variable display (missing) that shortens the remedial time. In this example, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (running out), as will be described later, the time-saving rush effect (for example, (See FIGS. 36-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and that control is performed in the time saving state, and to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (J), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if the big hit is lost, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom big hit) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to relief time reduction, which is not used for variation display that does not result in relief time reduction, but is used only for relief time reduction variation display (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush fake big hit) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving rush effect (for example, FIG. 36 -38 (G), (H)) and the production (for example, see Figure 36-41 (G')) of the common mode (for example, see Figure 36-41 (G')), the production to notify that it will be a big hit (for example, Figure 36-41 (H') reference) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

Note that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 is an example, and various modes are conceivable. For example, when the time saving state is lost during the time saving state and is controlled again to the time saving state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) A table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, for example, only if the time saving state continues until the next big hit out of the time saving loss (in this example, if the time saving loss A occurs during the time saving state), the jackpot shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) A variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for deviation during the time saving state controlled by .

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 36-7 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 36-8 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the loss time-saving, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving are configured to use different variation pattern tables (that is, the average variation time is different). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in either case, the same variation pattern table may be used (that is, the average variation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the lost time saving. Also, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
36-9 and 36-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is time saving A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time reduction B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specification command (probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a probability variation big hit. .

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until relief time reduction. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 time, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126 times, A command 957E (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 1 designation command is uniform. command 957F(H) is sent to

Command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800 times, A command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (restoration relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction when power is restored. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time when restoration is performed and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number designation command at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. And when it is 800 times or less, a command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a recovery time reduction time number designation command.

In this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the case of transmitting to . For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even when the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in units of one.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving. Command E004 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration specifying command) for designating the start of display of a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the reserved memory is not stored (that is, when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game. Also, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Further, for example, when shifting to a setting change mode for executing setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode for executing setting confirmation processing, a setting value designation command is transmitted after the end of each mode, and then customer waiting demonstration designation is performed. Command is sent. In addition, when the restoration process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, when 10 seconds pass without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, the relief time saving function is A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, a lottery determines whether or not to display a telop). Also, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command after receiving the customer waiting demonstration specifying command, the demonstration movie is reproduced.

Command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (set value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. A value corresponding to the setting value is set to "XX".

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 36-9 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 36-11 is a flow chart showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current relief time reduction counter value and to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time reduction The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power failure), the relief time can be reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the variable display that shortens the relief time is stored before the power failure.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time during recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery from a power failure, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to set a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the recovery time is shortened and transmitted.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, even if the variation display is executed 800 times, if neither the big hit nor the time-saving deviation occurs, the relief time-saving state occurs. will be controlled by In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C that indicate the time saving state, the time saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is performed during the time saving state, and the reserved memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, intentional initialization of the relief time reduction counter can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 36-12 and 36-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characterizing part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 100IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the big hit determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, the CPU 103, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability state is low), the jackpot determination value for low probability (Fig. 36-2 (A) and Fig. 36-3 (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 36-2 (B) and 36-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3.

If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal big win, variable probability big win, sudden variable probability big win) corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area as the type of the big win (step 100IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0. (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the remedy time saving after step 100IWS70, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "800" in the time saving counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since it is subtracted, it may be configured to add 1 again to the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, it may be configured such that "901", which is one more, is set in the time saving number counter in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction number counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or probability variable state, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated. . Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N of step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to EXT data, and issues a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Control for transmission to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 957E(H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving decision flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 100IWS75). . Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as the EXT data, command 957F as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is checked whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and controls the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit the data to the CPU 120 for use (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when transmitting the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, and to execute a fan effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect, which will be described later.

In addition, for example, as will be described later, the number of relief time reduction counters is set (set to "800") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and in a configuration where the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. Only when it becomes, it is configured to transmit the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 2, and when the time is reduced after the second time, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the number of times of saving time 2 are sent. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a time saving flag C indicating a time saving state controlled via relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS79, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving, without performing the time saving loss determination processing after step 100IWS81, it is assumed that there is no time saving loss as it is. It is decided that

In addition, not only during the time saving state through relief time saving, but also during the time saving state through the big win and during the time saving state through the time saving loss, it may be configured not to uniformly determine the time saving state. That is, not only when the time-saving flag C is set, but also when the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are set, the time-saving deviation determination processing after step 100IWS81 is uniformly not performed, and there is no time-saving as it is. may decide to exclude

Conversely, even during the time saving state via relief time saving, it may be configured to be able to determine the time saving deviation by executing the processing after step 100IWS81. In addition, it may be configured such that both relief time saving and time saving deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on relief time saving, or may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on time saving deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is not a time saving state via relief time saving), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS80, if it is in the probability variable state, without performing the time saving loss determination process after step 100IWS81, it is determined to be the loss without time saving as it is. be.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 36-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 36-3).

If it is determined to be time saving (Y in step 100 IWS82), the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving A or time saving) corresponding to the value that matches the type determination random number value stored in the random number buffer area B, time-saving loss C) is determined as the type of time-saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time-saving type determination is performed using the random number for type determination common to the random number for type determination used by jackpot type determination of step 100IWS65, and the random number for type determination. Furthermore, when configured to determine a small hit and also to determine a small hit type, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the big hit type determination and time saving type determination. It suffices to configure such that the determination process is performed by

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and when it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "7". When it is decided to make a sudden probability variable big hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be "9", and when it is decided to be a time-saving loss A, the stop pattern of the special pattern is set to "2". If it is determined to be time-saving deviation B, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be "4", and if it is determined to be time-saving deviation C, the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be "6". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36-14 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when it is a variation display that reduces the relief time and results in a big hit), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 36-8 (J ) is selected for the relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern table J (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when the variation display is a relief time reduction and is lost), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 36-8 (I ) selects the fluctuation pattern table I for the relief short-time fluctuation loss (step 100IWS 1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less. Check if it is. It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the values of the first reserved storage number counter and the second reserved storage number counter are 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (F). selects the variation pattern table F (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more (N of step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (G). is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not less than 10 (N of step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the first special symbol determination buffer. 36-7 and 36-8 is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination random number (step 100IWS 1716). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 36-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first, if not yet transmitted, the determination result of whether or not to hit the jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the time saving type Based on the determination result of (100IWS1121), to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command ~ display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU120.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be short (step 100IWS1123). 100 IWS 1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 is a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 is a design confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N of step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5 Seconds" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 36-16 and 36-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variable display during the probability changing state. The probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and even if the variation display is executed 800 times after the big win game ends, neither the next big win nor the time saving occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "800" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving times (step 100IWS172, S173 reference). By executing the processing of steps 100, IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time-saving state is controlled with the relief time-saving as a trigger, 800 times of fluctuation display is executed without becoming a big hit or time-saving failure. Triggered by this, "800" is set to the relief time reduction counter. Then, after that, even if the variable display is executed 800 times, if the next big hit or time-saving failure does not occur, the second relief time-saving is performed and the time-saving state is controlled. In this example, the time saving deviation does not occur in the time saving state triggered by the relief time saving, but it may occur and when it occurs, the value of the relief time saving number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set. ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N of step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the variable probability counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variable number counter (step 100IWS147), and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag A, and terminates the probability variable state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS141 to S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated while shifting to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation or the probability variable final variation. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the time of start of fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variable final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

In addition, in this example, although it shows the case where the time saving state ends as well as ending the probability changing state in the probability changing final variation, not only such an aspect, only the probability changing state ends and the time saving state continues may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be time saving (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS 154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter if the time saving is out of A (step 100 IWS 155 Y) (step 100IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving deviation A (Y in step 100 IWS 160) ( Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "200" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS 164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the time-saving loss as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is performed 800 times after the time-saving loss, neither the next big hit nor the time-saving loss occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the symbol fixing period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS174).

In this example, it is possible to continuously generate relief time reduction by controlling the time reduction state at the timing of relief time reduction and setting the relief time reduction counter (set "800"). Although it is configured to continue the time saving state until a big hit occurs once the time saving occurs, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction number counter is set only by controlling to the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction number counter is set at the timing of ending the 800-time variable display and controlling to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "800" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "800". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, is set as the symbol determination period to secure the effect period such as the mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and only the small pattern may be displayed so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, it shows the case of setting the same 800 times as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such an aspect Absent. For example, at step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" or a smaller value than "800" may be set to the time saving number counter.

Moreover, in step 100IWS172, the value according to the number of times of a plurality of types of time saving may be set to the time saving number counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "800". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of working hours reduction by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS 172, a value corresponding to the number of times of working hours decided by the lottery process may be set to the number of times of working hours counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(external output signal)
36-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 36-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. In addition, the big hit 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, which is reduced in relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, so there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed. 2, external output of two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the time saving state even when the relief time is shortened, if the missing symbol of the variable display that will be the relief time shortening is derived and displayed, at the end of the symbol fixing period, the big hit 2 signal External output is started.

It should be noted that the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a variation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the lost symbol, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the variation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big hit 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Also, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 36-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 100IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not the game is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter (step 100IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a variable probability flag and controls the variable probability state (step 100IWS541). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the variable probability counter (step 100IWS542). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW will be described. FIG. 36-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in this characterizing portion 108IW. As shown in FIG. 36-20, in the normal state, if the probability variation jackpot or suddenly probability variation jackpot is controlled to the probability variation state (see step 100IWS541 to S542), and if the normal jackpot becomes time saving state A ( It is controlled to the time saving state via the jackpot) (see step 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if it is lost in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process, after the big hit or time saving loss, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss) case) is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the variable probability state, if the variable probability big hit or the sudden variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled again to the variable probability state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time is reduced. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no case of relief time saving. Also, in the variable probability state, when the variable display is completed 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state A, when the probability variable jackpot or the probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot again It is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time-saving design is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, there is no case of relief time saving.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state B, if the probability variable jackpot or the probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled again to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (step 100 IWS 166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times of variation display is completed without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state B due to the time saving deviation A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability variable jackpot or the probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal jackpot occurs, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbols are derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled again to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (step 100IWS170-S173).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving is compared with the number of times of saving time corresponding to the determined type of time saving, and if the remaining number of the current number of times of saving time is larger, the current state of time saving A is continued as it is. may

In addition, in this example, when a normal jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving is larger, continue the current time saving state B as it is It may be configured to

In addition, in this example, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79). , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is off.

In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display by lottery processing, and to end the variable probability state based on the determination to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 36-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In FIG. 36-21, the processes of steps S71-S76 are similar to those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols, synchronously with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns is performed in a form in which the decoration patterns on the left, middle, and right are reduced.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the fourth symbol variable display is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5. FIG.

The processing of step S77 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the two vertically arranged LEDs in the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b repeat turning on and off alternately, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth pattern. be done.

In addition, when the fluctuation time ends, the stopped design of the fourth design is fixedly displayed at the start of the design fixing period. In this case, when a big win is achieved, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big win symbols are stopped and displayed in red light. In addition, when the time saving is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time saving pattern are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when it becomes a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below as a loss symbol (no time saving) are stopped and displayed in an extinguished state.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. good too.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a dedicated pattern as a time-saving loss pattern of the fourth pattern is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, the stop pattern of the fourth pattern in the case of a big hit and in the case of a time-saving loss. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 36-22 and 36-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command in the relief time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the relief time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a restoration time reduction time number designation command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the received restoration time relief time reduction number designation command, in the image display device 5, until the relief time reduction Control is performed to display the initial outcome according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times or less), "112" as the initial output is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining fluctuation number until relief time reduction is 701 times or more and 800 times or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 701 times or more and 800 times or less.

In addition, not only when displaying the initial output that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, the display that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened , a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after power restoration, display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or display a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations. It may be configured such that the suggestive display is performed at a relatively early stage. Also, it may be configured not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye) The number of remaining fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 100IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time-saving state, whether it is the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, not only the aspect shown in this example, regardless of whether the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving, to display a common background image may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. can be configured to

If the received effect control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134). , Lighting of the right hitting notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 100IWS645 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 36-24 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game, when the pending memory is not stored (that is, when the total pending memory number is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 12, a customer waiting demonstration specification command is transmitted.

When the customer-waiting demo designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer-waiting demo designation command, and when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to perform a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period in which the variable display is not performed. At step 105 IWS 251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

36-25 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 36-25, FIG. 36-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. This is a telop display execution lottery table used when "6" is set.

As shown in FIGS. 36-25 (A) and (B), in this example, it is configured such that the percentage of telop display during customer waiting differs depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of a telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-25(A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which telop display is performed during customer waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on whether there is a telop display during customer waiting.

Although FIGS. 36-25 show examples of setting values 1 and 6 for the sake of simplicity of explanation, a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of tables may be provided. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to execute the telop display (Y of step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to perform telop display with a red rendering mode and a blue rendering mode. At step 105 IWS 253, the effect mode of the telop display is decided by lottery.

FIG. 36-25(C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 36-25(C) and (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed during customer waiting is configured to differ depending on the remaining number of times until relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened by the production mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the effect mode of the telop display displayed while the customer is waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when 3 minutes elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning (Y in step 105 IWS 255), the effect control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is reproduced (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer are terminated when the effect control command or the like at the time of start-up winning is received.

FIGS. 36-26 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes of telop display. In the example shown in FIGS. 36-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C) or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 36-26(A), if the reserved memory is not stored at the time when the symbol fixing period has passed, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12. FIG.

Then, 10 seconds pass without receiving any other command such as the production control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the production control board 12, and the telop display of the customer waiting is displayed. When it is decided to carry out, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is decided to display a telop display in a blue effect mode, a telop display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 36-26(B), the border is white). ). In addition, when it is decided to display a telop display in a red effect mode, a telop display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 36-26(D), a black border is displayed) form).

Then, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command such as the effect control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the effect control board 12, the image display device 5 starts the demonstration. A movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 36-26(C) and (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the reproduction of the demonstration movie.

(Prefetching notice setting processing)
36-27 is a flow chart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result and a variation pattern is executed. Then, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, prefetching determination etc. to the effect control board 12 is set. done. The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

In the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), for example, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the effect control CPU 120 provides a effect control command at the time of the start winning (for example, the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination. ) is received (step 108 IWS 701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the effect control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. And when the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. , the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable display corresponding to the pending memory stored before the relief time reduction, the variable display when the relief time reduction is to be the notice target pre-reading notice effect While it is executable, execution of a look-ahead forewarning effect whose foretelling target is the variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened is restricted. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect straddling the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the time saving, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the time saving is achieved, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and determines the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution (step 108IWS703).

FIGS. 36-28 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table. At step 108 IWS 703, each table shown in FIGS. 36 to 28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution.

Specifically, when the game state is a state different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (A). However, when the game state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-28(B).

As shown in FIGS. 36-28(A) and (B), in this example, in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, and the big win is achieved. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of losing. Therefore, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (A) and (B), the time saving state C is more than the game state other than the time saving state C When the display result is out In addition, it is configured so that the proportion of execution of the look-ahead forewarning effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win is not generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest when the big win is not achieved though the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, execution is performed using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (C) Determine the effect type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, use the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. Determine the type. Specifically, as the type of effect, either the chance effect or the pending change effect is determined.

The chance eye effect is a variable display to be the target of the look-ahead forewarning effect when the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display to be the target of the foreseeing forewarning effect becomes the chance eye ("778" in this example). It is a production that suggests that will be a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed to encourage whether or not the display result will be the chance eye (“778” in this example). Further, for example, when the chance game effect is executed in the red color effect mode, the red chance game effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when the blue chance game effect is executed in the blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change effect suggests that the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect will be a big hit by displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a performance to do. Further, for example, when the pending change effect is executed in the red effect mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when the pending change effect is executed in the blue effect mode, the blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIGS. 36-29 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of each effect type of the pre-reading preview effect. Of FIG. 36-29, FIGS. 36-29 (A1) to (E1) show a specific example of the chance eye production, and FIGS. This is an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, one variable display is started as shown in FIG. As shown, left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7" which becomes the chance number "778" or "6" which does not become the chance number "778". is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36-29 (E1), when the central decorative symbol "7" is stopped and the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed, a variable display of a big hit is displayed in the reserved memory. It would suggest that there may be a corresponding reserved memory. It should be noted that there may be a case where a pattern (for example, "768") different from the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed after the stimulating effect is executed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 36-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning occurs, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a variable display that will result in a big win will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Regarding the pending change effect, it is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. You may make it change to the display mode different from a normal mode.

FIGS. 36-30 are time charts for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 36-30, FIG. 36-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via the big hit and the execution period of the predictive advance notice effect, and FIG. 36-30(B) is a time chart. , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 36-30 (A) and (B), it is assumed that the starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 36-30(A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the pre-reading preview effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the start winning is generated until the variable display of the pre-read target is started , an effect to arouse whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a stimulating effect is included, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display when executing the chance effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36-30 (A), when the pending change effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed from the timing when the starting prize occurs or the time when the starting prize occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. The display of the suspended display and active display in the post-change display mode is continued until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. That is, when executing the pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the variable display of the prefetch target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance effect and the pending change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) during one variable display, whereas the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

Also, as described above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, ultra-super-shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not performed when the loss is performed, and mainly shortening variation (5 seconds) is performed, but the time-saving state via relief In , ultra-ultrashortening variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed at the time of detachment. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 36-30, it is difficult to ensure the period for executing the chance effect in the time-saving state via relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (C) and (D), in the time saving state via the big hit, both the chance eye effect and the pending change effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance eye production is restricted as the look-ahead notice production, and only the pending change production can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the pre-reading announcement effect according to the game state.

Also, in step 108IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (E) is used. , Determine the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, use the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. Determines the type of production of . Specifically, either the red rendering mode or the blue rendering mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 36-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the big hit is more likely to be lost. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect in the red effect mode is higher than in the case of . Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect in the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, it is configured to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win has not occurred for a long time), the deterioration of interest when the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed by the blue performance mode with a low expectation of the big win is suppressed. be able to. In this example, in the time-saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when it is lost, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, it is configured so as not to frequently cause the display result to be incorrect even though the look-ahead foretelling effect is executed in the red effect mode.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIG. It is possible to vary the execution ratio of effects and the ratio of the type of effects and the mode of effects, thereby improving interest.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the execution of the notice effect is restricted (even if only the notice effect with high expectation is not executed) good), but the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the case of loss The ratio may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution ratio of the type of anticipation with high degree of expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 36-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, when a variable display that results in a big hit or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited. good too.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the pre-reading notice effect based on the determined contents (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is decided to execute the chance game effect, in step 108 IWS 704, the chance game flag is set as the execution setting of the chance game effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process, which will be described later, if the chance flag is set, the chance game effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance game effect. The chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the pending change effect, in step 108IWS704, the pending change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
36-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 100IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol for the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. A combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variable big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (probability variable big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. do. Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates "suddenly variable probability big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "135" decoration symbols (suddenly variable probability big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type. Also, when the execution setting of the chance game effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance game symbols (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

36-32 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS 802A, if the number of remaining times until relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance is determined using the notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. If the remaining number of times until the game is ten times or less, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-32(B). Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, if the remaining number of times until the relief time saving exceeds 10, the effect mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (C). However, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the mode of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-32(D).

As shown in FIGS. 36-32(A) and (B), in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing the big win. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is higher in the case of failure than in the case of failure. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (A) and (B), a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) Compared to the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10), the proportion of executing the notice effect when the display result is wrong is lower. is configured as With this configuration, a predetermined period before the relief time is reduced (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and effect effect described later are performed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a big hit.

In addition, in a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less), the countdown production and effect production described later are executed. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 36-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed). is displayed), and the ratio of executing the advance notice performance by the red performance mode is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (C) and (D), a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) If the display result is lost more than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10), the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode. It is configured so that the percentage of With such a configuration, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), although the notice performance is executed in the red performance mode, the interest when it does not become a big hit can suppress the decrease in

In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of notice effects with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the notice effects for types with high expectations for big hits (for example, when the degrees of expectation for big hits are classified into five levels, Only the announcement performance of the type with the fourth stage or higher of the expected degree of jackpot) is restricted to be executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 36-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, when the variable display that results in a big hit or time reduction is executed, the execution of the notice effect is performed. You may make it not restrict.

Also, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio is reduced In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the notice effect in the case of failure, or the notice effect of the type with high expectation The execution ratio may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 until relief time reduction selects a process table including a fanning effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, and 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until the value reaches 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 is determined, for example, by checking whether the EXT data value of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. I can judge.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush effect that notifies control to a time-saving state by relief time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to the time saving state as the relief time saving by the time saving rush performance, and to improve the interest in the time of the relief time saving.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush appearance effect for notifying that the big win will be achieved after executing the effect in the same manner as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS 806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Interest can be improved.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of times of relief time-saving variation is reached, a time-saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative patterns are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, is executed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and to improve the interest.

In addition, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a ready-to-win effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is lost when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a dedicated relief time-saving fluctuation loss-use variation pattern is used, but not limited to such a mode, for example, A variation pattern for losing the same as usual may be used, or a variation pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variation time may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the variation pattern before and when reaching the number of times of variation of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, after the symbol confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and the background image (in this example, orange color (Background image of display color) (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change of the background image is controlled to the time saving state by relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less ( step 108 IWS 807). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 108 IWS 808). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown presentation and effect presentation. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction A process table including countdown presentation and effect presentation corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and the effect presentation are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and effect presentation are always executed. You may make it determine whether. Also, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called false countdown production and effect production (for example, the countdown production and effect production are performed in a common manner) , the countdown presentation and the effect presentation corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but interrupted in the middle (see FIGS. 36 to 42). good too. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown production and effect production (genuine and fake) are better than when it is not 10 times or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance effect is performed (step 108IWS809). If the setting for execution of the chance game effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance game effect (including a chance game effect) (step 108 IWS 810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not performed, the effect that the chance eye symbol is not displayed stop after executing the effect to instigate whether it will be the chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. You may make it decide whether to carry out.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 36-33 and 36-34 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol determination A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS 852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the processing after step 100IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the design decision designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 100IWS857 to shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIGS. 36-35 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 100IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time reduction), time reduction loss pattern, big hit pattern) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot including the mode transition effect (effect for notifying the transition to the variable probability state (variable probability mode) and the short time state (short time mode)) and the notification of hitting to the right. (step 100IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speaker 27 as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing pattern (no time saving) or the time saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to variable display start waiting processing. (Step S170) is updated (Step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIGS. 36-36 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. As shown in Figure 36-36, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that will be a relief time reduction, the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is finished, and the missing design (no time reduction) When is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time reduction) is determined and displayed for a symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the winning symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the winning symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 36-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 36-36, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 100IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 36-36, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and the clarification of the production when switching the game state can be achieved. can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 36-37 to 36-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 36-37 to 36-40, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIGS. 36-37(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 800 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 800 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of understanding of the player regarding the specifications of the gaming machine with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are stopped and removed (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 36-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving start after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B), it shows a case where every 100 fluctuations are executed every 100 fluctuations, suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 times to 800 times does not perform the fanning effect, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 36-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen. be. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the winning symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844" and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the effect display 100IW104B in the range according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed. . In this example, as the number of remaining rotations decreases (that is, as the relief time reduction approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number of displayed effects increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (E), there is one rotation remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, It is assumed that a symbol combination of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) is started. 36-38(G), a time saving rush effect is started to inform that control is to be made to a time saving state (relief time saving), and a time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the control is to be in the time saving state (relief time saving), and to improve the interest in the time saving state (relief time saving).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-38 (G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 36-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, it is possible to make a notification that is generally performed during the ending period of the first game, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent addiction, or a game machine manufacturer's logo. may be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification in the time-saving rush effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as at the time of notification in the ending period of the first win, or in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may be performed during the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time-saving state by relief time-saving rather than in the time-saving rush performance.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 36-39(I), when the pattern is determined, a mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. After that, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed even in the mode transition effect, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggesting image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (depressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 36-1) is displayed. be. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIGS. 36-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 reading "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction is started. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK×1" can be executed as in FIGS. 36-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that shown in FIGS. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 36-8 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the design confirmation period), which has become a relief time, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 36-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the prefetch determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display “V STOCK×1” shown in FIGS. It is a production that informs.

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. Absent. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started at the timing of the confirmation display of the stop symbol shown in FIGS.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting an effect mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush appearance production will be described. FIGS. 36 to 41 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rush appearance effect. The example shown in FIGS. 36-41 follows the example of FIGS. 36-37(A)-(D).

As shown in FIG. 36-41 (E), one rotation remains until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and is removed (in this example, "123 ) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (F′), the remaining 0 rotations are left until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that the display result is a big hit, although this variable display is for saving time. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, there is no transition to the time-saving state due to the relief time-saving, and the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (G′), the time saving rush appearance effect is started, and the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C in the same mode as the time saving rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (G′), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the same manner as when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is completed, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the pattern of “254” ) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decoration symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the structure of this characterizing part 108IW is also executed to control a jackpot game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the jackpot during the small winning game. In the case of applying to a game machine configured to be able to do so, when the display result of the variable display for saving time is a small hit, the time-saving rush appearance performance is executed to notify the small win. good too.

Next, a description will be given of the so-called fake countdown presentation and effect presentation. FIGS. 36 to 42 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of production modes of the so-called fake countdown production and effect production.

As shown in FIGS. 36-42 (A) to (C), at the time when the remaining 49 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. A countdown from "10" is displayed each time the symbols are stopped after the variable display of the symbols is completed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 36-42 (A) to (C), at the time when 49 rotations remain until the shift to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake effect production is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10. An effect display 100IW 104B having a range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so as to widen the display range (the number of displayed symbols increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed before the display is performed in a manner corresponding to the case where the number of rotations remaining is one until the shift to the relief time reduction. is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the shift to the relief time reduction is not 0, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

As shown in Figure 36-42, when the so-called Gusset countdown production and effect production are configured to be executable, as shown in Figures 36-37 (A) and (B), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction It is also possible not to execute the inciting effect suggesting that. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between the genuine article and the counterfeit article.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, when the time saving is lost, the relief time saving counter is initially set to "800". or high-speed variation), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the characteristic portion 108IW described above, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, is set as the symbol determination period, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed during the symbol determination period. Although shown, such processing is not limited. For example, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is provided until the next fluctuation is started, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may Modification 1 will be described below, in which mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed by providing a postponement period until the start of the next variation.

FIGS. 36-43 are flowcharts showing an example of the special symbol process processing in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36-43, in Modification 1, in addition to the processing shown in FIG. 33, in the special symbol process processing, the next variation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) is included. It should be noted that in Modification 1, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the starting winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Also, the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Also, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Also, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Also, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Also, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Also, the process during jackpot opening (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Also, the jackpot opening post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Also, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Also, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In addition, the small hit during opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Also, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. is. In addition, in the modification 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. , differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 33 in that the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is transmitted.

In the modified example 1, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processing of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hit end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. is similar to

FIGS. 36-44 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in Modification 1. FIG. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 36-16 and 36-17. In modification 1, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts (20 seconds in this example). is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 36-17.

FIGS. 36-45 are flowcharts showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. FIG. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process is terminated.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (in this example, 20 seconds) shows the case of transitioning to the time saving state at the timing that has passed, such It is not limited to modes. For example, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement process, and to shift to the time saving state at the start of the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification while controlling to the time-saving state, or may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling to the time-saving state. can be considered.

Further, in Modification 1, the case of uniformly measuring 20 seconds as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set "800") at the time of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, when the relief time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction A different postponement period may be set for the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case of the relief time shortening during the normal state, and it is measured in the next variable postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onwards. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Also, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decoration pattern, but displays only the small pattern so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. good too.

In addition, in the modified example 1, the case of extending the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement process when the relief time is shortened is shown, but not only such an aspect, the fluctuation display of the time saving is out may also be applied, and the next fluctuation postponement process similar to that of Modification 1 may be executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started.

Further, as described above, when applying to variable display for time saving, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 36-17 may be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. With such a configuration, the pattern fixing period of the variable display in the case of time saving loss can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal variable display, and the processing related to right-handed notification etc. can be executed in the same process as

FIGS. 36-46 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 36-46, in the modification 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display of the relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is terminated, and the When the symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time saving) is fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the lost symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for the same 0.5 second pattern fixing period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern fixing period ends, the next variation postponement period of 20 seconds is entered (see step 100IWS114), as shown in FIGS. 36-46. Then, during the next fluctuation postponement period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 36-46. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIGS. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period has passed, it is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 36-46, in the image display device 5, the background image (this In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color).

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the design confirmation period of the lost pattern, and after the symbol confirmation period has passed, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period At the start of the game, four jackpot signals may be output. The 4 jackpot signals here are signals to be externally output during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display pattern confirmation period, which is a relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

In addition, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, when the next fluctuation postponement process starts (that is, when the next fluctuation postponement period starts), the player is in a game state in which it is assumed that he will hit to the right. You may make it output the test signal and external output signal which show, and you may make it start right-handed alerting|reporting. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to hitting to the right and to report hitting to the right at appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 36-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to change the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds. Although the case of displaying is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. FIGS. 36-47 are explanatory diagrams for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time saving, as the modification 8-37.

First, with reference to FIGS. 36-47 (A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the above characteristic portion 108IW, after the RAM clearing process (without being a big hit or time saving), 800 times of fluctuation display is executed, or after a big hit or time saving is lost (with the next big hit or time saving) Without distinguishing whether it is a case of executing 800 times of fluctuation display, fluctuation pattern tables F, G (Fig. 36-8 (F), (G) from 10 fluctuations before uniform relief time reduction ) is selected, and the variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown production and effect production, and after being controlled to the time saving state as a relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig. 36-8(E)) is selected to execute a 1.5-second high-speed fluctuation display, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in modification 2 of FIGS. 36-47, in the case of reducing the relief time by performing 800 times of variation display after the RAM clear process, before the 10th variation before the relief time reduction to 1 variation Also, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 36-7 (B)) is selected to perform the same variation display as usual, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table C (FIG. 36-7 (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time-saving state at the time of passing the big hit, and to perform the variation display of 5 seconds at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47, when the 800th variation display is performed after the big hit and the relief time is shortened, the variation is performed when the 800th variation display is performed. From the pattern table I (see FIG. 36-8 (I)), a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) for relief short-time variation failure is selected, and variation display is performed with a variation time of 25 seconds. It should be noted that the characteristic portion 108IW described above is configured to execute the time-saving entry effect during the variable display, and to execute the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification during the pattern fixing period, but for example, during the variable display for 25 seconds (In this case, therefore, 0.5 seconds may be ensured for the pattern fixing period as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display to reduce the relief time differs depending on whether the relief time is shortened after the RAM clearing process or the relief time is shortened after the big hit. In addition, it is possible to make the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state through the relief time saving state different, thereby making the performance different.

Further, for example, as shown in the modification 4 of FIGS. 36-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 36-7 (B)) is selected even before 10 variations to 1 variation before the relief time is shortened. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 36-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state at the time of the big hit is selected to perform a 5-second variable display at a high rate, and in the time-saving state based on the second relief time-saving, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 36-8 (E)) and 1.5 seconds high speed It may be configured to perform a variable display of variations.

(Example 2)
Next, a gaming machine according to Example 2 of the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-48 to 36-54. In addition, about Example 2, a part different from Example 1 is mainly demonstrated.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near. Therefore, in the second embodiment, like the variation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 36-8 (F) of the first embodiment, and the variation pattern table G as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for That is, if the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the tendency of the variation pattern allows the player to notice that it is immediately before the relief time reduction. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variable display that reduces the relief time is not a dedicated variation pattern for the reduced relief time, but a variation pattern that is also used for the variable display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, such as the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I) of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the repair time is shortened and before the repair time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. 36-48 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 36-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. 36-7 and 36-8 is determined (step 100IWS 1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer Waiting Demonstration Effect Control Process in Second Embodiment)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIGS. 36-26), but the relief depends on whether or not this telop display is executed and the presentation mode. There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time saving or the relief time saving is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer-waiting demonstration specification command, a telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

In addition, even in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is short or that the relief time is near, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed or the mode of presentation. However, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution ratio decreases, or not). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image when it becomes a relief time reduction (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised You can give it and improve your interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. 36-49 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIGS. 36-50 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the announcement effect execution determination table and the announcement effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-50(A). Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the effect mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36-50 (A) and (B), in any case of the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are configured to be determined by a common proportion. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when it becomes a relief time reduction and shifts to the time reduction state C, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the time reduction state C (relief time reduction via time reduction state) (In this example, the background image is displayed in orange) (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the stimulation production according to the remaining variation number until the relief time is shortened, The processing for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the processing for displaying the initial number corresponding to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to execute a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time is shortened. However, in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less) before the relief time is shortened, the execution of the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production is restricted (for example, , lower execution rate, or no execution). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that reduces the relief time is not the dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction, but the variation pattern that is also used for the variation display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in Example 2, the processing for executing the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving rush appearance effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is performed, the change in the background image (that is, notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly performed Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in the second embodiment)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 36-51 are timing charts for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 36-51, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that will be a relief time reduction, the special design and the decoration design are displayed. For example, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the game ends, and when the lost pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Then, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see steps 100IWS74 and S75). After the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, it ends, and when the missing pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the missing pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed over the design confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS 1137). Then, after the symbol determination period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 36-51, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the amusement when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-51, in the period in which the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after shifting to the time saving state C, the right-handed notification is performed (FIG. 36-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a game state of hitting to the right while suppressing the complexity of the performance relating to the transition to the time saving state C, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

(Production example in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the production mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 36 to 52 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. It should be noted that in FIGS. 36-52, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (A), when the fluctuation display to be relief time reduction is started and the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (B) 2, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing patterns.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C1), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

It should be noted that, when the reserved storage is not stored when the pattern fixing period has passed, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In, while switching to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving), the right hitting notification may be performed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. ) may be performed. In addition, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the effect suggesting that the relief time reduction is near is not executed, but at an arbitrary timing, a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIGS. 36-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and interest can be improved.

In addition, the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time reduction is established can be improved. In addition, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the production mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 36-52. For example, Modification 1 shown in FIGS. 36-53 and Modification 2 shown in FIGS. 36-53 may be used.

(Production example [Modification 1] in Embodiment 2)
FIGS. 36-53 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2. FIG.

In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 36-53, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display to shorten the relief time is stopped, the variable display to shorten the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-53(B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is executed to make the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see on the image display device 5. be done.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 36-53 (C) when the blackout state is eliminated, the image display and the output of the effect sound are performed to notify that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 36-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, when it is a variable display that saves time, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) can be realized.

(Production example [Modification 2] in Embodiment 2)
FIGS. 36 to 54 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

In the modification 2 shown in FIGS. 36-54, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (A), a variable display that is a relief time reduction is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time ( For example, when 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 36-54(B), the decorative symbols 100IW100 are temporarily stopped and displayed in combination with the missing symbols on the image display device 5. FIG. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 36-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not passed, the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see. executed. In addition, the special figure variation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed in combination with the missing pattern. The time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed during the symbol fixing period.

Then, when the symbol determination period has passed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. It is switched to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state via the relief time saving). In addition, as shown in FIG. 36-54(D), the notification of hitting to the right is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 36-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, when it is a variable display that saves time, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) can be realized.

At the timings of FIGS. 36-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 36-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A), (B) You may be made to perform the explanation (for example, explanation of the production|presentation in relief time reduction function or relief time reduction) regarding time saving. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining variations until the relief variation is 10 or less), the variation pattern to be super reach is determined. , While it is configured to be restricted to decide to execute the notice effect, in the second embodiment, neither is configured to be restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and a notice of a type whose expectation is not very high among the notice effects The production may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of the variation pattern for super reach, and to limit the execution of a type of advance notice effect with a high degree of expectation among the advance notice effects.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the effect (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) that suggests that the relief time is near, such as a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, Effect production is executed, initial results according to the number of times until relief time reduction and telop display during customer waiting (for example, telop display 108IW101 shown in FIGS. 36-26) are displayed. I can't limit it. For example, at an arbitrary timing during the variable display or during the stoppage of the variable display, a motion effect to operate the movable body 32, a light emission effect to make the light emitting body such as a decorative LED emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), the movable body 32 Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of vibration effects such as vibrating the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc., it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command transmitted when the power is turned on (for example, the effect control command to instruct restoration from power failure, the effect control command to instruct initialization) , If the performance control board 12 side could not receive normally (for example, if the command was missed or the command was garbled), based on the command specifying the game state, the command specifying the variation pattern, etc. Although the production of can be executed, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion production that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near. be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command that specify the number of times of variation until relief time reduction (in this example, sent each time a variable display is performed ) can not be received normally, the remedy suggesting effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestive performance may not be executed only during the variable display in which the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1 or the command for the number of times of relief time 2 can not be normally received, or the relief suggestion performance may not be executed until the next big hit occurs. You may make it not perform suggestion production. Also, for example, if it is not possible to receive normally, the relief suggestion performance is executed in a production mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will result in relief time reduction is large (that is, it is not close to relief time reduction). may With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive presentation.

Moreover, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above show the case of application to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on the variation display result, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a game machine configured to be able to execute a role game that controls a big win game based on the fact that a game ball wins a prize (V win) in a specific area (V prize area) in the accessory during a small win game, You may apply the structure controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown by characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example described above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, switch the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is executed or the jackpot occurs, or randomly change the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter You may switch to "800" or "900."

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C was set each time the relief time saving occurred, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has moved again may differ from the time saving flag (third value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example shown above, the case of making different effects (variation patterns) between the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (fluctuation pattern) may be provided in the time saving state after the big hit and in the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification is made just before the end of the time saving state after the big hit and just before the start of the relief time saving (notification of Fig. 36-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) good.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where different productions (variation patterns) are made in the time saving state and the relief time saving state are shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is good also as the same production (variation pattern) in the time saving state and relief time saving out of time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification is made just before the end of the time saving state and just before the start of the relief time saving (notification of Fig. 36-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) good.

As described above, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1A) to (means 8A) shown below.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, a game Step 100IWS166 in the control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed based on (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, game control Part for executing steps 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 part to be executed), predetermined suggestive effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 49, steps in the effect control CPU 120 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2) background image changes, blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), etc.) Effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-23, A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS 638), and the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established (for example, FIG. 36 - As shown in 44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. (See Figures 36-50). According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is started. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is made difficult to see (for example, it is blacked out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition ends. , blacked out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is an aspect of changing the background display in the means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is performed ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation effect executing means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2 ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53(D) and 36-54(D), explanations are given using the telop displays 100IW103 shown in FIGS. 36-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to 5A, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 36-48). part for executing setting processing), and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation )), and the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the missing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer and a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. a buffer), backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means and pending information stored by the pending storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute initialization processing to initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, and when power supply is started, backup storage Restoration means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control by the initialization process, power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the special number of times of variable display is stored before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can be specified to be controlled in a special state; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time-saving counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if power supply is stopped Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and initialization means (for example, game control and a portion where the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means holds the special status information, the number of times of execution information, and the numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , in the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving counter are initialized On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set)). According to such a configuration, intentional initialization of the numerical information can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, a game Step 100IWS166 in the control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed based on Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and a variable than the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern with a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) Pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36-14), and the state control means is the numerical information updated by the update means, which is displayed variably When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when it is not the specific display result (for example, FIG. 36-7 ( A) , (B), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of loss) , when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7(A), the variation pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are higher than the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the percentage determined in the case of a big hit), before the special condition is established In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 36-8 (F)). , (G), just before the relief time is reduced, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B, the suggesting effect executing means is provided which can execute a suggesting effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display while waiting for customers), and the suggesting effect executing means In the predetermined period before the special condition is established, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is higher than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the effect control CPU 120 ∼ S809, and the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can expect the establishment of the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in Figs. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any one of means 1B to 3B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display can be executed. When the specific display result is obtained, the proportion of executing the notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) period) is lower than the period before the predetermined period, the proportion of executing the notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31 , the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 36-32 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 5B) In any one of means 1B to 4B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect executing means performs a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the proportion of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) than the period before the predetermined period (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 36-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode during the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, a game Step 100IWS166 in the control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed based on Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including rushing out)) and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-13), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in FIG. 36-13 As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. In (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, step 108IWS1701A, S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), a special variable Specific notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, for game control The portion of microcomputer 100 that executes step 108IWS806B. 36-38 (G), (H)) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means executes a specific notification effect when a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display satisfying the special condition is executed, and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the production in the same mode as the specific notification production is executed. Special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 36- 41 (G'), see (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display that satisfies a special condition is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is established. A predetermined notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, a full rotation effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed according to a mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or 2C, when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode is the same as before the special condition is met. Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result is derived and displayed by pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. Display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) longer than (for example, as shown in Figure 36-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135. See Figure 36-36), the special condition is established In the display period of the display result of the variable display when the As shown, the effect control CPU 120 has a portion for executing step 100IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period , and after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 36-18). According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIGS. ), output a special signal. According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 8C) In any one of means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, a left-handed path) can pass ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special path (for example, a right-handed path) can pass, and a variable display of identification information, the second Variable display execution means (for example, game control (the part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be shot toward the special path (for example, in a game state where the player is assumed to hit right a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game medium The second start condition is established when the game medium passes through the second passage area, and the special output means provides a display result of the variable display when the special condition is established. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIGS. 36-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output capable of specifying that the game media should be shot toward the special path at an appropriate timing.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, a game Step 100IWS166 in the control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed based on Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns Display pattern determination means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-48), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variable When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the execution number of displays, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 A portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is established, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), and the special condition is established. After the non-specific display result (e.g., lost pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special notification effect (e.g., a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction ( orange)) can be executed Special information effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established. Also, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a reserve storage means (for example, a first reserve memory number buffer or a second reserve memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserve information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met; a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a pending change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means, wherein the pre-reading notice execution means is Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, the variable display when the special condition is established can be executed as an announcement target, while the variable that the special condition is established can be executed. Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed. is a mode for changing the background display on the display means to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest, and prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any one of means 1D to 3D, there is provided suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects, effect effects, telop display during customer waiting, etc.). The suggestive effect executing means restricts the execution of the suggestive effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, explanation effect execution means capable of executing explanation effects regarding special conditions based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53(D) and 36-54(D), a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37(A) and (B) is provided). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and from the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including shortened variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) whose variable display periods are shortened (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is , It is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in 100, step 100IWS170, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern in the case of a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See Figures 36-7 (C) and 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display reaches a specific number, the rate of execution of variable display by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated based on update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of reach production (For example, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) (for example, for game control A portion where the microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is unspecified in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern in the case of the display result is low (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See Figures 36-7 (C) and 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result is low, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-23, step 100IWS634, S638 in the effect control CPU120 portion) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or 2E, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112 and a pending memory means (for example, a first pending memory number buffer or a second pending memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and a pre-reading notice execution means. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and the ratio of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and any of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice The ratio of whether to execute the production is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-27, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 36-28 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and execution type of the foreseeing advance notice effect are determined in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. It can be different, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer or a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. buffer), and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, The pre-reading notice execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display when the special condition is established among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, a game Step 100IWS166 in the control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display are executed based on (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. And update the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part) characterized by do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In this example, the initial value is set to the relief time-saving number counter when a big hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots with no time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with second special symbols, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set. It may be configured as

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design mainly fluctuates is shown in a normal state, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased to vary both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established on the basis that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession ( For example, for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) (for example, FIG. 36 As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again. Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

It should be noted that, in this example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state) shows the case of updating the relief time reduction number counter, such It is not limited to modes. For example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), high probability low base (latency probability change) update the relief time reduction counter in all four states It may be configured as In this case, it can also be applied to a gaming machine that executes a drop lottery to the normal state in the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, the case of preferentially digesting the second special symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first start winning hole, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) is provided for frequent small hits, the game balls are digested in order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are provided is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any one of means 1a to 3a, the update means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS135, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 36-17). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) may have been According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 36 -17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17, the game (the part that executes step 100 IWS 167 in the control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) In means 4a, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , When a specific condition is established (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to the initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIGS. 36-47 The part shown in Example 4) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state has not been controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, The parts shown in modified examples 2 and 3) may be configured as described above. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, a gaming machine controllable to a jackpot game state), in which a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path); Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game necessary for executing multiple types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state A process executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) for updating the data value indicating the progress state and executing the process corresponding to the data value; In addition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13 2, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 part that executes S110 to S113), the data value is When the second numerical value is different from the first numerical value, the second processing relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is When the third numerical value is different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes the third processing for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-43, In the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS114), in the normal state, the game is played by shooting the game medium along the first path, and in the special state, the game is played by shooting the game medium along the second path. 36 to 46) for executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during execution of the third process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means that can update numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control and advantageous state control It updates the data value indicating the game progress state necessary for executing a plurality of types of processing including, and executes processing corresponding to the data value (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, game control and a part for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. Controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS 172 and step 100IWS 173), the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, 33, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes the second processing regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, FIG. As shown in 33, the microcomputer for game control a portion of the computer 100 executing steps S114 to S117), a third value for controlling the state control means to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values; Execute the process (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), the notification effect to notify that it is controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process It is characterized by comprising an effect executing means (see FIGS. 36-46) for executing According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In addition, in this example, the case of giving priority to the processing related to the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, priority may be given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In this example, a case is shown in which the right stroke is notified in the next fluctuation postponing process, which is the third process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that only the mode transition effect suggesting transition to the time-saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display satisfying the special condition ( For example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, 1b-2 or 2b, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control In the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the microcomputer 100), the processing executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 36 -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, As shown in 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100), different processing is executed when the special information is the first information and the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 36-14, it may be configured as a part for executing step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determining means determines different variable display patterns depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, step 100 IWS 1714 (the part that executes According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern in which the determination time of the display result is different between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) shown below is disclosed in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1c) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17 36-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means and a state information control means for controlling identifiable state information, wherein the state control means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and then to the special state. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number It can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 2, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the update means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed number in The value information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, neither the time saving flag A nor C is set, and the data corresponding to each is "0 ”), and the state information is set to the second numerical value when controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, FIG. 36-19 As shown in , the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), based on the establishment of the special condition When it is controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. That is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information is the second numerical value and the third numerical value, it is possible to transmit specific information according to (for example, the part shown in FIG. 36-10, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the game control micro 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS540 in the computer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In addition, although the case where the time saving state A designation|designated command and the time saving state C designation|designated command were transmitted was shown in this example as specific information, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the background designation command and the variation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that can identify the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. good too. In addition, for example, when a big win is achieved, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes according to the game state, and depending on which command is received. The fanfare period and the ending period may be changed.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the It may be configured to use a fourth numerical value different from the three numerical values (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a different effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any one of means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means When the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the condition, a common effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, the state control means, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed When the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform steps 100IWS 636, (the part that executes S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means Common when the state control means controls to the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition It may be configured to be able to execute effects (for example, effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-17 36-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means that can update the numerical information based on that (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply When it is stopped, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of the variable display; It is possible to control to a special state when the condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means produces predetermined information when power supply is started. It is possible to transmit to the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means receives the predetermined information. In a predetermined period after the start of supply, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect related to the number of times variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-22, a portion that executes step 100IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120) and According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect by changing the background, effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and display on a demo screen or menu screen.

It should be noted that when a command (S9 in FIG. 36-12) specifying initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time reduction as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started (for example, As shown in 36-11, it may be configured as a portion for executing step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, a player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, which increases the operation rate of the game machine and suppresses an increase in the processing load.

In addition, although the case where the command which can specify the value of a relief time reduction counter is shown at the time of restoration is shown in this example, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in units of 100 rotations, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, . . . 500 to 599 rotations can be specified. Although the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but 127 or less may be configured to transmit an identifiable command.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition based on the specific information ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120), as the specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times of variable display execution and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, the relief time reduction number of times 1 designation command), the difference between the execution number of variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value Second specific information that can be specified And, (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to suitably implement the processing relating to the specific information.

In this example, the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value shows the case of transmitting the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command is the second specific information, such a mode not limited to For example, when the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, it may be configured not to transmit the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command, which is the second specific information.

(Means 4d) In any one of means 1d to 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display for a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120, FIGS. 36-39 (I) to 36-40 (M )), and every time the variable display is executed a second predetermined number of times, which is less than the first predetermined number of times, before the special number of variable displays are executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120, FIGS. 36-37(A) to 36-38(F)) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to the player, the risk of unknowingly incurring losses can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, although the case where production|presentation is performed based on the count value of a relief time reduction counter is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling effects corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that executes step 108 IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 36-17 As shown, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 part, step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; , when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory content of the backup storage means is initialized, and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition; (For example, parts shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling effects corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. A part that executes step 108 IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 36-17 As shown, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 part, step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; , when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition; It is characterized by executing different effects (for example, parts shown in modified examples 2 and 3 in FIGS. 36-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after clearing the RAM, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to use a plurality of variation pattern tables as in the case after the big hit.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is a variable display. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the above, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is the special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed. When the special condition is satisfied by the corresponding specific value, the update means can be controlled to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated in each case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states, including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state , the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after the definite variable time reduction is a normal jackpot , and the relief time saving state is made higher than the time saving state after the normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times, which is common between the time of control and the time of control. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and 800 times, which is the condition to be controlled to reduce the relief time when controlled to the big hit based on the first special pattern and when controlled to the big hit based on the second special pattern. may be configured so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, the disadvantageous set value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values including a value, and a special condition set to an unfavorable set value is more difficult than set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state which is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state which is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after the special state is controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to a disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1"), the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time is less than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (e.g. "6"). Then, the advantage in the saving working hours is set higher than the advantage in the saving working hours after the big hit. It should be noted that those who are set to disadvantageous settings (e.g. "1") have a higher relief time-saving arrival rate than those set to advantageous setting values (e.g. "6"), and relief time-saving is always time-saving Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big win (for example, the number of times of time saving is 100 times after the normal big win).

(Means 4f) In any one of means 1f to 3f, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any one of means 1f to 4f, when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is satisfied while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of the setting value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for each of the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of means 1f to 5f, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established, rather than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to 6f, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any one of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8f, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a state; an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display; a variable display executing means capable of executing variable display based on the following; a holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information when the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met; and power supply is stopped. backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and pending information when the power supply is started; recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means and the hold information stored by the hold storage means when the state control means , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, so that when the special condition is established, the special state can be controlled, and after the restoration control is executed , when the special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can control to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the second identification information is displayed. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player while optimizing the control by the initialization.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization process, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when the power is restored The relief time-saving counter and the pending memory are restored, and when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th variation and the condition for the relief time-saving control is established, the relief time-saving control is enabled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and the variation that becomes the condition for the relief time reduction control when the big win is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the big win is controlled based on the second special pattern. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In means 1g or 2g, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to an unfavorable setting (eg "1"), it will reduce the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (eg "6"). is higher than the advantage of the time-saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1") is more likely to be lost than the advantageous setting (e.g. "6"), so it is easier to save time. , Since the relief time reduction is always 800 times of time reduction (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time reduction state via the big win (for example, the number of time reduction is usually 100 times after the big win). good too.

(Means 4b) In any one of means 1g to 3g, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any one of means 1g to 4g, when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g, for example, when a big win occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of means 1g to 5g, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of means 1g to 6g, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any one of means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8g, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, and the updating means is a variable of the first identification information Further comprising a suggestive effect executing means capable of updating the numerical information when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and executing a suggestive effect related to establishment of the special condition, wherein the suggestive effect is provided. The execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes to execute the suggestive presentation in accordance with the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation suggests a period until the special condition is established. It is an aspect to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown production in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIGS.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode that can specify the number of execution times of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode suggesting the number of fluctuations as a condition for the relief time saving control.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is a effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and displayed in any mode. The period until the implied special condition is established differs depending on whether the According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the mode of the specific image.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to execute telop display during customer waiting and the mode of presentation using, for example, a table shown in FIGS. 36-25. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ according to the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any one of means 1h to 3h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of means 4h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using a table shown in FIGS. 36-25, for example.

(Means 5h) In any one of means 1h to 4h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In this characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration that determines the effect mode of telop display during customer waiting, for example, using a table shown in FIGS. 36-25.

(Means 6h) In any one of means 1h to 5h, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the start condition being satisfied and the starting condition being satisfied; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means detects at least one of the operation of the operating means and the passage of a game medium through a predetermined area while the predetermined image is displayed. Based on what has been done, a suggestive effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 6h, for example, when the game machine is shifted to the demonstration state, the game ball is operated by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the start port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which setting value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

Note that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 7h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer, using a table shown in FIGS. 36-25.

(Means 8h) In any one of means 1h to 7h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 8h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to execute the telop display during customer waiting and the mode of presentation using the table shown in FIGS. 36-25.

(Means 9h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; A setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect to suggest is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect depending on which set value is set. The effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), the telop display during customer waiting is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(means 10h) in any one of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value, wherein the setting suggestion effect execution means performs a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner according to which setting value is set. The execution ratio differs, and the suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect according to the specific mode regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), even if any set value is set, the customer is waiting in a red effect mode. may be configured so that the execution ratio of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any one of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive effect execution means is configured so that when the power supply is started and the initialization process is executed and when the recovery process is executed, the power supply is stopped. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display during customer waiting and the countdown effect is different after the initialization process and after the power is restored. It should be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) Any one of means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, wherein the variable display pattern determination means When the condition is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is established, the special state is entered when the special variable display pattern is not determined and the variable display is executed by the special variable display pattern. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying that the game is to be controlled. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the game machine of the means 12h is based on a configuration using a pattern table for relief short-time fluctuation deviation shown in FIG. 36-8(I), for example.

(Means 13h) In any one of means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determination means is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. When the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is higher than the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the previous period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on the configuration using the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 36-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) In any one of means 1h to 13h, there is provided a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means can execute the advance notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable display than the period before the predetermined period. When the result does not result in a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect by using a table shown in FIGS. 36-32, for example.

(Means 15h) In any one of means 1h to 14h, there is provided a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means is capable of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result, and the display of the variable display. When the result is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect mode by using a table shown in FIGS. 36-32, for example.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 123... Display control unit 200... Dispensing device 202... First guiding passage forming part 201... Sphere tank forming part 203... First passage forming body 210... Terminal board 220... Cover body 271A to 271H... Hole 314, 324, 334 Cover Part 340 ... ball stop member N1 to 6, 11 to 16 ... screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous state when a specific result is derived and displayed,
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
variable means capable of changing between a first position in which the game medium flowing down the guide passage forming portion can flow down and a second position in which the game medium cannot flow down;
with
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part ,
When the variable means is positioned at the second position, the screw member is less likely to fall into the dispensing portion than when the variable means is positioned at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images